blob: f1b58b580080fe6a86c4868a08e900e80405e7a2 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100504 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
505 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
506 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
507 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200508 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300509 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
510 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
511 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
512 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100513 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
514 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
515 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200516 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200517 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
518 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
519 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300520 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
521 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200522 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300523 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
524 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200525 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100526 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
527 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
528 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
529 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
530 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
531 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100532 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200533 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
534 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
535 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 */
537struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200538 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200540 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530541 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100542 u16 aid;
543 /* erp related data */
544 bool use_cts_prot;
545 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300546 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200547 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800548 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700549 u16 beacon_int;
550 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200551 u64 sync_tsf;
552 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100553 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100554 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300555 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200556 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200557 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200558 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
559 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100560 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
561 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200563 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300564 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100565 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200566 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200567 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300568 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300569 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
570 size_t ssid_len;
571 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200572 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100573 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100574 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200575 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100576};
577
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800578/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200579 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800580 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700581 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800582 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100583 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
585 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
586 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
587 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
588 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
589 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
590 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
591 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
592 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
593 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
594 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
597 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200599 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200602 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200603 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
604 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
605 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
606 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
607 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
608 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
609 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
610 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
613 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300614 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
615 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
617 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
618 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600619 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
620 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
621 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
624 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200625 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
626 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
628 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100629 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
630 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
631 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
633 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
634 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
635 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100636 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
637 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
638 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100639 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
640 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
641 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200642 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
643 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
644 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
647 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
649 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
650 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
651 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200652 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
653 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
654 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530655 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
656 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
657 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
659 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
660 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200661 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
662 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530663 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
664 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
665 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
667 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
668 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530669 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
670 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
671 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
672 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
673 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200674 *
675 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
676 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800677 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200678enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
682 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
683 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
684 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
685 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
687 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
688 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
689 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
690 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600692 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200700 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200704 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530705 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200706 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710};
711
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200712#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
713
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200714/**
715 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
716 *
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
718 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
720 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200724 *
725 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
726 */
727enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
728 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530729 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100730 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100731 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200732 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200733};
734
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200735/*
736 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
737 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
738 */
739#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
742 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
743 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200747
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530748/**
749 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
750 * Rate Control algorithm.
751 *
752 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
753 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
754 *
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
757 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
761 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530762 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
763 * Greenfield mode.
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100765 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
767 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530768 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
769 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
770 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
772 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200773enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
777
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100778 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
782 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
783 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100784 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
785 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
786 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800787};
788
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200789
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200790/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
791#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200792
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200793/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
794#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
795
796/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200797#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200798
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200799/* maximum number of rate table entries */
800#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
801
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200802/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200804 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200805 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
806 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200807 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200808 *
809 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
810 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
811 *
812 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
813 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200814 *
815 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
816 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
817 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
818 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300819 * information::
820 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200821 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300822 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200823 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
824 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
825 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
826 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300827 * information should then contain::
828 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200829 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300830 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200831 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
832 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200833 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200834struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
835 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100836 u16 count:5,
837 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000838} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200839
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100840#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
841
842static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
843 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
844{
845 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200846 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
847 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848}
849
850static inline u8
851ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
852{
853 return rate->idx & 0xF;
854}
855
856static inline u8
857ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
858{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200859 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100860}
861
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200862/**
863 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200864 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200865 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
866 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
867 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
868 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
869 *
870 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200871 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200872 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100873 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700874 * @control: union for control data
875 * @status: union for status data
876 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100877 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700878 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100879 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700880 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200881 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200882 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200883struct ieee80211_tx_info {
884 /* common information */
885 u32 flags;
886 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200887
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200888 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100889
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100890 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100891
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200892 union {
893 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200894 union {
895 /* rate control */
896 struct {
897 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
898 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
899 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200900 u8 use_rts:1;
901 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200902 u8 short_preamble:1;
903 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200904 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200905 };
906 /* only needed before rate control */
907 unsigned long jiffies;
908 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200909 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200910 union {
911 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
913
914 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
915 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
916 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
917 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
918 * sojourn time computation.
919 */
920 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
921 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200923 u32 flags;
924 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200925 } control;
926 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200927 u64 cookie;
928 } ack;
929 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200931 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200932 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100933 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200934 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300935 u16 tx_time;
936 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200937 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200938 struct {
939 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
940 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200941 u8 pad[4];
942
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200943 void *rate_driver_data[
944 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
945 };
946 void *driver_data[
947 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200948 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700949};
950
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300951/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200952 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
953 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200954 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
955 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
956 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200957 *
958 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
959 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
960 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
961 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
962 */
963struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200964 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
965 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200966 const u8 *common_ies;
967 size_t common_ie_len;
968};
969
970
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200971static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
972{
973 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
974}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400975
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200976static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
977{
978 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
979}
980
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200981/**
982 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
983 *
984 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
985 *
986 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
987 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
988 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
989 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
990 *
991 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
992 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
993 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
994 */
995static inline void
996ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
997{
998 int i;
999
1000 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1001 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1002 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1003 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1004 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1005 /* clear the rate counts */
1006 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1007 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1008
1009 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001010 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001011 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1012 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1013 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1014}
1015
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001016
1017/**
1018 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1019 *
1020 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1021 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1022 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1023 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001024 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1025 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001026 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001027 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1028 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001029 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1030 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1031 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1032 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001033 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1034 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001035 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1036 * the frame.
1037 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1038 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001039 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001040 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1041 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1042 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001043 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1044 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1045 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001046 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1047 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001048 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1049 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001050 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1051 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1052 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001053 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1054 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1055 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1056 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1057 * on this subframe
1058 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1059 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001060 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1061 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001062 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1063 * processing it in any regular way.
1064 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1065 * them for sniffing purposes.
1066 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1067 * monitor interfaces.
1068 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1069 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001070 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1071 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1072 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1073 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1074 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1075 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1076 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1077 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1078 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001079 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1080 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1081 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001082 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1083 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1084 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001085 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1086 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001087 */
1088enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001089 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1090 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001091 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001092 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1093 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1094 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1095 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001096 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001097 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1098 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1099 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1100 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1101 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1102 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1103 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1104 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1105 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1106 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1107 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1108 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1109 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1110 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1111 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1112 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001113};
1114
1115/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001116 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001117 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001118 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001119 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1120 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1121 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1122 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1123 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1124 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1125 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1126 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001127 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001128 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001129enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1130 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001131 RX_ENC_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(1),
1132 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1133 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1134 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1135 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1136 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001137};
1138
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001139#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1140
1141enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1142 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1143 RX_ENC_HT,
1144 RX_ENC_VHT,
1145};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001146
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001147/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001148 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1149 *
1150 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1151 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001152 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001153 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001154 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1155 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001156 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1157 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001158 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1159 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001160 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001161 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001162 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1163 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001164 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1165 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1166 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001167 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1168 * values were filled.
1169 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1170 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001171 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001172 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001173 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001174 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001175 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001176 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1177 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001178 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001179 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001180 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1181 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1182 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001183 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001184struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1185 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001186 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001187 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001188 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001189 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001190 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001191 u8 enc_flags;
1192 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001193 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001194 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001195 u8 rx_flags;
1196 u8 band;
1197 u8 antenna;
1198 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001199 u8 chains;
1200 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001201 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001202};
1203
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001204/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001205 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1206 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1207 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1208 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1209 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1210 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1211 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1212 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1213 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1214 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1215 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1216 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1217 * @data field.
1218 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1219 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1220 * length
1221 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1222 *
1223 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1224 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1225 * data.
1226 */
1227struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1228 u32 present;
1229 u8 align;
1230 u8 oui[3];
1231 u8 subns;
1232 u8 pad;
1233 u16 len;
1234 u8 data[];
1235} __packed;
1236
1237/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001238 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1239 *
1240 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1241 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001242 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1243 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1244 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001245 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1246 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1247 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1248 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1249 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1250 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1251 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001252 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1253 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1254 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1255 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1256 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1258 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001259 */
1260enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001261 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001262 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001263 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001264 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001265};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001266
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001267
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001268/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001269 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1270 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001271 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001272 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001273 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001275 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001276 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001277 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001278 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001279 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1280 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001281 */
1282enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001283 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001284 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001285 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001286 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001287 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1288 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1289 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001290 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001291};
1292
1293/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001294 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1295 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001296 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1297 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1298 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1299 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1300 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001301 */
1302enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1303 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1304 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1305 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1306 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1307
1308 /* keep last */
1309 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1310};
1311
1312/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001313 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1314 *
1315 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1316 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001317 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1318 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001319 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001320 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1321 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1322 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001323 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1324 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1325 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1326 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001327 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1328 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001329 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001330 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001331 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001332 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001333 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001334 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1335 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001336 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001337 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1338 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001339 *
1340 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1341 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001342 * configured for an HT channel.
1343 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1344 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001345 */
1346struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001347 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001348 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001349
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001350 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001351 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001352
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001353 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1354
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001355 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001356 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001357 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001358};
1359
1360/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001361 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1362 *
1363 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1364 * operation.
1365 *
1366 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1367 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1368 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1369 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001370 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1371 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001372 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1373 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001374 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001375 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1376 */
1377struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1378 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001379 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001380 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001381 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001382 u8 count;
1383};
1384
1385/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001386 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1387 *
1388 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1389 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001390 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1391 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1392 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1393 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001394 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1395 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1396 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1397 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001398 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1399 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1400 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001401 */
1402enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1403 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001404 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001405 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001406 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001407};
1408
1409/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001410 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1411 *
1412 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1413 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1414 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001415 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001416 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1417 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001418 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001419 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1420 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001421 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1422 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1423 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001424 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001425 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1426 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1427 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1428 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001429 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1430 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001431 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1432 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1433 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1434 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1435 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001436 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001437 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001438 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001439 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1440 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001441 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001442 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001443 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001444 */
1445struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001446 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001447 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001448 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001449 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001450 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001451 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001452
1453 u8 cab_queue;
1454 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1455
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001456 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1457
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001458 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1459
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001460 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001461
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001462#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1463 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1464#endif
1465
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001466 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1467
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001468 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001469 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001470};
1471
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001472static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1473{
1474#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001475 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001476#endif
1477 return false;
1478}
1479
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001480/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001481 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1482 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1483 *
1484 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1485 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1486 *
1487 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1488 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1489 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1490 */
1491struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1492
1493/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001494 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1495 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1496 *
1497 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1498 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1499 *
1500 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1501 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1502 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1503 */
1504struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1505
1506/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001507 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1508 *
1509 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1510 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1511 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001512 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1513 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001514 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1515 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001516 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1517 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1518 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001519 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1520 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001521 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001522 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1523 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001524 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001525 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001526 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001527 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1528 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1529 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001530 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1531 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1532 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1533 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1534 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1535 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1536 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001537 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001538 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001539 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001540 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1541 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1542 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001543 */
1544enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001545 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1546 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1547 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1548 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1549 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1550 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1551 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001552 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001553};
1554
1555/**
1556 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1557 *
1558 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1559 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1560 *
1561 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1562 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001563 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001564 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001565 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1566 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001567 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1568 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1569 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001570 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1571 * data block:
1572 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1573 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1574 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001575 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1576 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001577 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001578struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001579 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001580 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001581 u8 icv_len;
1582 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001583 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001584 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001585 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001586 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001587 u8 key[0];
1588};
1589
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001590#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1591
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001592#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1593#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1594
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001595/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001596 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1597 *
1598 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1599 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1600 * reverse order than in packet)
1601 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1602 * reverse order than in packet)
1603 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1604 * reverse order than in packet)
1605 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1606 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001607 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001608 */
1609struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1610 union {
1611 struct {
1612 u32 iv32;
1613 u16 iv16;
1614 } tkip;
1615 struct {
1616 u8 pn[6];
1617 } ccmp;
1618 struct {
1619 u8 pn[6];
1620 } aes_cmac;
1621 struct {
1622 u8 pn[6];
1623 } aes_gmac;
1624 struct {
1625 u8 pn[6];
1626 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001627 struct {
1628 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1629 u8 seq_len;
1630 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001631 };
1632};
1633
1634/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001635 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1636 *
1637 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1638 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1639 *
1640 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1641 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1642 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1643 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1644 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1645 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1646 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1647 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1648 * key_idx value calculation:
1649 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1650 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1651 */
1652struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1653 u32 cipher;
1654 u16 iftype;
1655 u8 hdr_len;
1656 u8 pn_len;
1657 u8 pn_off;
1658 u8 key_idx_off;
1659 u8 key_idx_mask;
1660 u8 key_idx_shift;
1661 u8 mic_len;
1662};
1663
1664/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001665 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1666 *
1667 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1668 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1669 *
1670 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1671 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1672 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001673enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001674 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001675};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001676
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001677/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001678 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1679 *
1680 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1681 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1682 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1683 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1684 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1685 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1686 */
1687enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1688 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1689 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1690 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1691 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1692 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1693 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1694};
1695
1696/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001697 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1699 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1700 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1701 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1702 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1703 *
1704 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1705 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1706 */
1707enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1708 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1709 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1710 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1711 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1712};
1713
1714/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001715 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1716 *
1717 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001718 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001719 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1720 */
1721struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1722 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1723 struct {
1724 s8 idx;
1725 u8 count;
1726 u8 count_cts;
1727 u8 count_rts;
1728 u16 flags;
1729 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1730};
1731
1732/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001733 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1734 *
1735 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1736 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1737 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1738 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1739 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001740 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001741 *
1742 * @addr: MAC address
1743 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001744 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001745 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1746 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001747 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1748 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1749 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001750 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1751 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001752 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001753 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001754 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001755 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1756 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001757 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001758 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001759 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1760 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1761 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1762 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001763 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001764 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001765 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001766 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1767 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301768 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001769 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1770 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1771 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001772 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001773 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001774 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001775 */
1776struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001777 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001778 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1779 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001780 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001781 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001782 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001783 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001784 u8 uapsd_queues;
1785 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001786 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001787 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001788 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001789 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001790 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001791 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301792 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001793 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001794
1795 /**
1796 * @max_amsdu_len:
1797 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1798 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1799 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1800 *
1801 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1802 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1803 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1804 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1805 *
1806 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1807 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1808 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1809 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001810 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001811 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001812 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001813
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001814 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1815
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001816 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001817 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001818};
1819
1820/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001821 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1822 *
1823 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301824 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001825 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001826 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1827 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1828 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001829enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001830 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1831};
1832
1833/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001834 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1835 *
1836 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1837 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1838 */
1839struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1840 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1841};
1842
1843/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001844 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1845 *
1846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1847 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1848 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1849 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001850 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001851 *
1852 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1853 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1854 */
1855struct ieee80211_txq {
1856 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1857 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1858 u8 tid;
1859 u8 ac;
1860
1861 /* must be last */
1862 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1863};
1864
1865/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001866 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1867 *
1868 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1869 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1870 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1871 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1872 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1873 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001874 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1875 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1876 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1877 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1878 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1879 * algorithm.
1880 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1881 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1882 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1883 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1884 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1885 * CCK frames.
1886 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001887 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1888 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1889 * the FCS at the end.
1890 *
1891 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1892 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1893 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1894 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1895 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1896 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001897 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001898 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001899 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1900 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1901 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1902 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1903 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001904 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1905 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1906 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1907 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1908 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001909 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1910 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1911 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301912 *
1913 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1914 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001915 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001916 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1917 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1918 *
1919 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1920 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1921 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1922 *
1923 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1924 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001925 *
1926 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1927 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001928 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301929 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1930 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1931 * the stack.
1932 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001933 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001934 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1935 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001936 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001937 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1938 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1939 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001940 *
1941 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1942 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1943 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1944 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1945 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1946 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001947 *
1948 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1949 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1950 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1951 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1952 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1953 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001954 *
1955 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1956 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1957 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001958 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001959 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1960 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1961 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001962 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1964 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1965 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1966 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001967 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1968 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1969 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1970 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1971 * supported cipher suites.
1972 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001973 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1974 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1975 * for frames.
1976 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001977 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1978 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1979 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1980 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001981 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001982 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1983 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1984 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1986 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1987 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001988 *
1989 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1990 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001991 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001992 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1993 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1994 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1995 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1997 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1998 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1999 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002000 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002001 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2002 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2003 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002004 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002005 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002006 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002007 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2008 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2009 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002010 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2011 * within A-MPDU.
2012 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002013 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2014 * for sent beacons.
2015 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002016 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2017 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2018 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2019 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2020 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002021 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2022 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2023 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2024 * timeout.
2025 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002026 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2027 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2028 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002029 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2030 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2031 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2032 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2033 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2034 *
2035 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2036 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2037 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302038 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2039 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2040 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2041 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2042 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002043 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2044 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2045 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2046 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002047 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002048 */
2049enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002050 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2053 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2054 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2055 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2058 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2059 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2061 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2062 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2063 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2064 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2066 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2067 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2068 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2069 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2072 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2073 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002079 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002080 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002081 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002082 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002083 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002084 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002085 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2086 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302087 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002089
2090 /* keep last, obviously */
2091 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002092};
2093
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002094/**
2095 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002096 *
2097 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2098 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2099 *
2100 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2101 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2102 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002103 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2104 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002105 *
2106 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2107 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002108 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2109 * along with this structure.
2110 *
2111 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2112 *
2113 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2114 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2115 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002116 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2117 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002118 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002119 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002120 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002121 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002122 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002123 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002124 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002125 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002126 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2127 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2128 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002129 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2130 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2131 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002132 *
2133 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2134 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002135 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2136 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002137 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2138 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002139 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2140 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002141 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002142 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2143 * can handle.
2144 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2145 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002146 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002147 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002148 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2149 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2150 * aggregation.
2151 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2152 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2153 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002154 *
2155 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002156 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2157 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2158 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2159 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002160 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002161 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2162 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2163 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002164 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2165 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002166 *
2167 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2168 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002169 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002170 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002171 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002172 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2173 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002174 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002175 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002176 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2177 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2178 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2179 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2180 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2181 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2182 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2183 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002184 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002185 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2186 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002187 *
2188 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2189 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2190 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2191 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2192 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2193 * neither enabled.
2194 *
2195 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2196 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2197 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002198 *
2199 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2200 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2201 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002202 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2203 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002204 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002205struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002206 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002207 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002208 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002209 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002210 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002211 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002212 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002213 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002214 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002215 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002216 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002217 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002218 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002219 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002220 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002221 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002222 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002223 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002224 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002225 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002226 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002227 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002228 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002229 struct {
2230 int units_pos;
2231 s16 accuracy;
2232 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002233 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002234 u8 uapsd_queues;
2235 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002236 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2237 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002238 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002239};
2240
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002241static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2242 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2243{
2244 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2245}
2246#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2247
2248static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2249 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2250{
2251 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2252}
2253#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2254
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002255/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002256 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2257 *
2258 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2259 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2260 */
2261struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2262 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2263
2264 /* Keep last */
2265 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2266};
2267
2268/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002269 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2270 *
2271 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2272 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2273 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2274 * @status: channel-switch response status
2275 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2276 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2277 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2278 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2279 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2280 */
2281struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2282 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2283 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2284 u8 action_code;
2285 u32 status;
2286 u32 timestamp;
2287 u16 switch_time;
2288 u16 switch_timeout;
2289 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2290 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2291};
2292
2293/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002294 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2295 *
2296 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2297 *
2298 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2299 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2300 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2301 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2302 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002303 *
2304 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002305 */
2306struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2307
2308/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002309 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2310 *
2311 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2312 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2313 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002314static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2315{
2316 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2317}
2318
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002319/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002320 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002321 *
2322 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2323 * @addr: the address to set
2324 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002325static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002326{
2327 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2328}
2329
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002330static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2331ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002332 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002333{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002334 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002335 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002336 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002337}
2338
2339static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2340ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002341 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002342{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002343 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002344 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002345 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002346}
2347
2348static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2349ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002350 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002351{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002352 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002353 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002354 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002355}
2356
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002357/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002358 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2359 * @hw: the hardware
2360 * @skb: the skb
2361 *
2362 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2363 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2364 */
2365void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2366
2367/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002368 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002369 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002370 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2371 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2372 *
2373 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2374 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002375 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2376 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2377 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002378 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2379 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2380 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002381 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2382 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2383 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2384 *
2385 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2386 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2387 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2388 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2389 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002390 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2391 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2392 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2393 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2394 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002395 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2396 *
2397 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2398 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2399 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2400 * based on the receive flags.
2401 *
2402 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2403 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2404 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2405 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002406 *
2407 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2408 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2409 * handler.
2410 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002411 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002412 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2413 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002414 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002415 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002416 *
2417 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2418 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2419 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002420 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002421
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002422/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002423 * DOC: Powersave support
2424 *
2425 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2426 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002427 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2428 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2429 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2430 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2431 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2432 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2433 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2434 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002435 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002436 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2437 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2438 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002439 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2440 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002441 *
2442 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2443 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2444 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002445 *
2446 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2447 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2448 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2449 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002450 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2451 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002452 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002453 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002454 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2455 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2456 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2457 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2458 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2459 * periods.
2460 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002461 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002462 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2463 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2464 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2465 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2466 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2467 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2468 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2469 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2470 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2471 *
2472 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002473 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002474 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002475 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2476 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2477 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2478 *
2479 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2480 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002481 */
2482
2483/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002484 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2485 *
2486 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002487 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002488 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2489 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2490 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2491 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2492 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2493 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002494 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2495 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002496 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2497 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2498 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2499 *
2500 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2501 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2502 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2503 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2504 *
2505 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2506 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2507 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2508 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002509 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002510 * - a list of information element IDs
2511 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2512 *
2513 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2514 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2515 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2516 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2517 * vendor information elements.
2518 *
2519 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2520 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2521 *
2522 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2523 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2524 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2525 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2526 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2527 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2528 *
2529 *
2530 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2531 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2532 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2533 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2534 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2535 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2536 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2537 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2538 *
2539 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2540 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2541 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002542 */
2543
2544/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002545 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2546 *
2547 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2548 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2549 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2550 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2551 *
2552 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2553 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2554 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2555 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2556 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2557 * hardware flags.
2558 *
2559 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2560 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2561 * turned off otherwise.
2562 *
2563 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2564 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2565 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2566 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2567 */
2568
2569/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002570 * DOC: Frame filtering
2571 *
2572 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2573 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2574 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2575 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2576 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2577 *
2578 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2579 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2580 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2581 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002582 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2583 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2584 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2585 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2586 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2587 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2588 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002589 *
2590 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2591 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2592 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2593 * or dropped.
2594 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002595 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2596 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2597 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2598 * the flag, but not clear it.
2599 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2600 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2601 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2602 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2603 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2604 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2605 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2606 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002607 */
2608
2609/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002610 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2611 *
2612 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2613 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2614 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2615 *
2616 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2617 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2618 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2619 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2620 * the driver code.
2621 *
2622 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2623 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2624 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2625 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2626 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2627 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2628 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2629 *
2630 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2631 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2632 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2633 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2634 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2635 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2636 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2637 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2638 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2639 * @sta_notify callback.
2640 *
2641 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2642 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2643 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2644 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2645 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2646 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2647 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002648 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002649 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2650 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2651 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2652 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2653 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2654 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2655 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002656 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2657 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2658 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002659 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2660 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2661 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2662 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2663 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2664 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2665 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2666 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2667 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2668 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2669 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2670 *
2671 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2672 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2673 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2674 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2675 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2676 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2677 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2678 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2679 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2680 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002681 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002682 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2683 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2684 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2685 *
2686 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2687 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2688 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2689 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2690 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002691 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002692 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2693 *
2694 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2695 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2696 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2697 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002698 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002699 *
2700 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2701 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2702 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2703 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002704 */
2705
2706/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002707 * DOC: HW queue control
2708 *
2709 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2710 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2711 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2712 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2713 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2714 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2715 *
2716 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2717 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2718 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2719 *
2720 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2721 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2722 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2723 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2724 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2725 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2726 * the hardware queue.
2727 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2728 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2729 *
2730 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2731 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2732 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2733 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2734 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2735 *
2736 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2737 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2738 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2739 * off-channel queue: 9
2740 *
2741 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2742 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2743 *
2744 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2745 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2746 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2747 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2748 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2749 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2750 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2751 *
2752 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2753 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2754 *
2755 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2756 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2757 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2758 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2759 */
2760
2761/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002762 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2763 *
2764 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2765 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2766 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2767 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2768 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002769 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2770 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2771 * multicast address.
2772 *
2773 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2774 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2775 *
2776 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2777 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2778 *
2779 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2780 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2781 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2782 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2783 * honour this flag if possible.
2784 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002785 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2786 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002787 *
2788 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002789 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002790 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002791 *
2792 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002793 */
2794enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002795 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2796 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2797 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2798 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2799 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2800 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002801 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002802 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002803};
2804
2805/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002806 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2807 *
2808 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2809 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002810 *
2811 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2812 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002813 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002814 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2815 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002816 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2817 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2818 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002819 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002820 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2821 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2822 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2823 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2824 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2825 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2826 * session is gone and removes the station.
2827 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2828 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2829 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2830 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002831 */
2832enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2833 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2834 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002835 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002836 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2837 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2838 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002839 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002840};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002841
2842/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002843 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2844 *
2845 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2846 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2847 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2848 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2849 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2850 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2851 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2852 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2853 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2854 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2855 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2856 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2857 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2858 */
2859struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2860 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2861 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2862 u16 tid;
2863 u16 ssn;
2864 u8 buf_size;
2865 bool amsdu;
2866 u16 timeout;
2867};
2868
2869/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002870 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2871 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002872 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2873 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002874 */
2875enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2876 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002877 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002878};
2879
2880/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002881 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2882 *
2883 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002884 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2885 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2886 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002887 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002888 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2889 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2890 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002891 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2892 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002893 */
2894enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2895 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2896 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002897 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002898 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002899};
2900
2901/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002902 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2903 *
2904 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2905 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2906 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2907 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2908 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2909 *
2910 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2911 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2912 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2913 */
2914enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2915 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2916 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2917};
2918
2919/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002920 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2921 *
2922 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2923 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2924 *
2925 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2926 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2927 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2928 * of wowlan configuration)
2929 */
2930enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2931 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2932 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2933};
2934
2935/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002936 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2937 *
2938 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2939 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2940 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2941 *
2942 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2943 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2944 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002945 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002946 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002947 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002948 *
2949 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2950 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2951 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2952 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2953 * or zero.
2954 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2955 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2956 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002957 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002958 *
2959 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2960 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2961 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2962 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002963 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2964 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002965 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002966 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002967 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2968 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2969 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2970 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2971 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002972 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2973 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2974 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2975 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002976 *
2977 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2978 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2979 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2980 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2981 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2982 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002983 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2984 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2985 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2986 * in suspend().
2987 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002988 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002989 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002990 * and @stop must be implemented.
2991 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2992 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2993 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2994 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2995 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002996 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002997 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002998 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2999 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3000 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3001 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3002 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3003 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003004 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3005 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3006 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3007 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3008 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3009 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3010 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003011 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003012 *
3013 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3014 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003015 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003016 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003018 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3019 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3020 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3021 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3022 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003023 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3024 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003025 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003026 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3027 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3028 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3029 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003030 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3031 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003032 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003033 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003034 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3035 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3036 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3037 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3038 * which flags are changed.
3039 * This callback can sleep.
3040 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003041 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003042 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003043 *
3044 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003045 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3046 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003047 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003048 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003049 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003050 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003051 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3052 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3053 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003054 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003055 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003056 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3057 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3058 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3059 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3060 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3061 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003062 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3063 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3064 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3065 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003066 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003067 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003068 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3069 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003070 * that power save is disabled.
3071 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3072 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3073 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3074 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3075 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3076 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3077 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003078 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003079 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003080 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3081 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3082 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3083 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3084 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3085 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3086 * The callback can sleep.
3087 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003088 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3089 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3090 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3091 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3092 *
3093 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003094 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003095 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003096 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3097 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003098 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3099 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3100 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003101 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003102 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3103 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3104 * this notification.
3105 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003106 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003107 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3108 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003109 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003110 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003111 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3112 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3113 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003114 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003115 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003116 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003117 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3118 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3119 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003120 * The callback can sleep.
3121 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003122 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003123 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003124 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003125 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3126 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3127 *
3128 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003129 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3130 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3131 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3132 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3133 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003134 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303135 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3136 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003137 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3138 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303139 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003140 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003141 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3142 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3143 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003144 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003145 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3146 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3147 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3148 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003149 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3150 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3151 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3152 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3153 * The callback can sleep.
3154 *
3155 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3156 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3157 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3158 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3159 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003160 * The callback can sleep.
3161 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003162 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3163 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3164 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3165 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3166 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3167 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3168 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003169 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3170 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3171 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003172 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003173 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3174 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3175 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3176 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3177 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3178 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3179 * The callback can sleep.
3180 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003181 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003182 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003183 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003184 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003185 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003186 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003187 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003188 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003189 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003190 *
3191 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003192 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003193 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003194 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003195 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003196 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3197 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3198 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3199 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3200 * The callback can sleep.
3201 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003202 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3203 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3204 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3205 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003206 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003207 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003208 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3209 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3210 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003211 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003212 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003213 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003214 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3215 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003216 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3217 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3218 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003219 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003220 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003221 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3222 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003223 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3224 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3225 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003226 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003227 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3228 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003229 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003230 *
3231 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003232 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3233 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3234 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3235 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003236 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003237 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003238 *
3239 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3240 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3241 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3242 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003243 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003244 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3245 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3246 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3247 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3248 *
3249 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003250 *
3251 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3252 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3253 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3254 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3255 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3256 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003257 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003258 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3259 * must be accepted in this case.
3260 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003261 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3262 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003263 *
3264 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3265 *
3266 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303267 *
3268 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3269 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303270 *
3271 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3272 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3273 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003274 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3275 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003276 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003277 *
3278 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3279 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3280 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3281 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003282 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003283 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3284 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3285 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3286 * more-data bit must always be set.
3287 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3288 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003289 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3290 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3291 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3292 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3293 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3294 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003295 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3296 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3297 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003298 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3299 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003300 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003301 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003302 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003303 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3304 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3305 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003306 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003307 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3308 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3309 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3310 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003311 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003312 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003313 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3314 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3315 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003316 *
3317 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3318 *
3319 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3320 *
3321 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3322 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3323 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003324 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3325 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3326 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3327 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3328 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3329 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3330 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3331 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3332 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3333 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3334 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3335 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003336 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003337 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3338 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3339 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3340 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3341 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3342 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3343 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3344 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3345 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003346 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303347 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003348 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303349 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003350 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3351 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3352 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303353 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003354 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3355 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303356 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003357 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3358 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303359 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003360 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3361 * another, as specified in the list of
3362 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3363 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303364 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003365 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003366 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3367 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3368 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3369 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3370 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3371 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3372 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003373 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003374 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3375 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3376 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3377 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3378 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003379 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003380 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3381 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3382 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003383 *
3384 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3385 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3386 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003387 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003388 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3389 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003390 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003391 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003392 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3393 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003394 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3395 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003396 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003397 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003398 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3399 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3400 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003401 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003402 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3403 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3404 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3405 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003406 *
3407 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3408 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3409 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003410 *
3411 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3412 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003413 *
3414 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3415 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3416 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3417 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3418 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3419 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3420 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3421 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3422 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003423 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3424 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3425 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3426 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3427 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3428 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3429 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003430 *
3431 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003432 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3433 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3434 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3435 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003436 *
3437 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3438 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003439 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3440 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3441 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3442 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3443 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3444 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003445 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3446 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3447 * this call.
3448 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3449 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3450 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003451 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003452struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003453 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3454 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3455 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003456 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003457 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003458#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3459 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3460 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003461 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003462#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003463 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003465 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3466 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003467 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003468 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003469 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003470 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003471 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3472 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3473 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3474 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003475
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003476 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3477 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3478
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003479 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003480 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003481 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3482 unsigned int changed_flags,
3483 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003484 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003485 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3487 unsigned int filter_flags,
3488 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003489 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3490 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003491 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003493 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003494 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3496 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3497 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3498 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003499 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3501 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003502 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003504 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003505 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003506 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003508 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3510 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003511 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003512 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003514 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3516 const u8 *mac_addr);
3517 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003519 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3520 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003521 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3522 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3523 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003524 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003525 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003526 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3527 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3528 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3529 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303530#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3531 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3533 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3534 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303535#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003536 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003537 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003538 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3540 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3541 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003542 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3544 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003545 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3547 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3548 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003549 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3550 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3551 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003552 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3554 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3555 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003556 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003558 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003559 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3560 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3561 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003562 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3563 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003564 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003565 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003566
3567 /**
3568 * @ampdu_action:
3569 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3570 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3571 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3572 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3573 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3574 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3575 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3576 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3577 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3578 *
3579 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3580 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3581 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3582 *
3583 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3584 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3585 *
3586 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3587 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3588 * - ``TX: 81``
3589 *
3590 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3591 *
3592 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3593 * The callback can sleep.
3594 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003595 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003596 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003597 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003598 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3599 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003600 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003601 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003602#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003603 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3604 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003605 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3606 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3607 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003608#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003609 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3610 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003611 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003612 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003613 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003614 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3615 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003616
3617 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003619 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003620 int duration,
3621 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003622 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003623 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3624 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3625 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303626 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303627 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3628 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003629 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3631 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003632
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003633 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3635 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3636 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3637 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003638 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3640 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3641 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3642 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003643
3644 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3645 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3646 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3647 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3648 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3649 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3651 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003652
3653 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003655
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003656 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3657 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3658
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003659 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3660 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3661 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3662 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3663 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3664 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3665 u32 changed);
3666 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3668 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3669 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3671 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003672 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3673 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3674 int n_vifs,
3675 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003676
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003677 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3678 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003679
3680#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3681 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3683 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3684#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003685 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3687 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003688 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3689 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3690 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003691
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003692 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3694
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003695 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3696 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003697 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3698 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003699 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3700 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003701
3702 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3703 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3704 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3705 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003706 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003707 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3709 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003710 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3711 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3712 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003713
3714 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3715 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003716 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003717
3718 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3719 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3720 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3721 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3722 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003723 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3725 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003726 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3728 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3729 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3730 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3731 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003732};
3733
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003734/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003735 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3736 *
3737 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3738 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3739 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3740 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3741 * @priv_data_len.
3742 *
3743 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3744 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3745 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3746 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3747 *
3748 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3749 */
3750struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3751 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3752 const char *requested_name);
3753
3754/**
3755 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003756 *
3757 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3758 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3759 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3760 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3761 * @priv_data_len.
3762 *
3763 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3764 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003765 *
3766 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003767 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003768static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003769struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003770 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3771{
3772 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3773}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003774
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003775/**
3776 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3777 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003778 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3779 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3780 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003781 *
3782 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003783 *
3784 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003785 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003786int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3787
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003788/**
3789 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3790 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3791 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3792 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3793 */
3794struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3795 int throughput;
3796 int blink_time;
3797};
3798
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003799/**
3800 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3801 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3802 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3803 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3804 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3805 */
3806enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3807 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3808 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3809 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3810};
3811
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003812#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003813const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3814const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3815const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3816const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3817const char *
3818__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3819 unsigned int flags,
3820 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3821 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003822#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003823/**
3824 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3825 *
3826 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3827 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3828 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3829 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3830 *
3831 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003832 *
3833 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003834 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003835static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003836{
3837#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3838 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3839#else
3840 return NULL;
3841#endif
3842}
3843
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003844/**
3845 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3846 *
3847 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3848 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3849 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3850 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3851 *
3852 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003853 *
3854 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003855 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003856static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003857{
3858#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3859 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3860#else
3861 return NULL;
3862#endif
3863}
3864
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003865/**
3866 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3867 *
3868 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3869 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3870 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3871 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3872 *
3873 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003874 *
3875 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003876 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003877static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003878{
3879#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3880 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3881#else
3882 return NULL;
3883#endif
3884}
3885
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003886/**
3887 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3888 *
3889 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3890 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3891 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3892 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3893 *
3894 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003895 *
3896 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003897 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003898static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003899{
3900#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3901 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3902#else
3903 return NULL;
3904#endif
3905}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003906
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003907/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003908 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3909 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003910 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003911 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3912 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3913 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003914 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3915 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3916 *
3917 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003918 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003919static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003920ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003921 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3922 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3923{
3924#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003925 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003926 blink_table_len);
3927#else
3928 return NULL;
3929#endif
3930}
3931
3932/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003933 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3934 *
3935 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3936 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3937 *
3938 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3939 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003940void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3941
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003942/**
3943 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3944 *
3945 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3946 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003947 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003948 *
3949 * @hw: the hardware to free
3950 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003951void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3952
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003953/**
3954 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3955 *
3956 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3957 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3958 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3959 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3960 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3961 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3962 *
3963 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3964 */
3965void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3966
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003967/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003968 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003969 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003970 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3971 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3972 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3973 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3974 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3975 *
3976 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3977 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3978 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3979 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3980 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3981 *
3982 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3983 *
3984 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003985 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003986 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3987 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003988 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003989void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3990 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003991
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003992/**
3993 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3994 *
3995 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003996 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3997 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3998 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3999 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004000 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004001 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004002 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4003 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004004 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4005 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004006 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004007 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004008 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004009 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4010 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004011 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004012static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4013{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004014 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004015}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004016
4017/**
4018 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4019 *
4020 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004021 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4022 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004023 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004024 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4025 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004026 *
4027 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4028 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004029 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004030void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004031
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004032/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004033 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4034 *
4035 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4036 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4037 *
4038 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004039 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4040 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004041 *
4042 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4043 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4044 */
4045static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046 struct sk_buff *skb)
4047{
4048 local_bh_disable();
4049 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4050 local_bh_enable();
4051}
4052
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004053/**
4054 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4055 *
4056 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4057 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4058 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4059 *
4060 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4061 *
4062 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4063 * each other.
4064 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004065 * @sta: currently connected sta
4066 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004067 *
4068 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004069 */
4070int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4071
4072/**
4073 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4074 * (in process context)
4075 *
4076 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4077 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4078 * applies.
4079 *
4080 * @sta: currently connected sta
4081 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004082 *
4083 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004084 */
4085static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4086 bool start)
4087{
4088 int ret;
4089
4090 local_bh_disable();
4091 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4092 local_bh_enable();
4093
4094 return ret;
4095}
4096
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004097/**
4098 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4099 * @sta: currently connected station
4100 *
4101 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4102 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4103 * connected station was received.
4104 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4105 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4106 * be serialized.
4107 */
4108void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4109
4110/**
4111 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4112 * @sta: currently connected station
4113 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4114 *
4115 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4116 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4117 * from a connected station was received.
4118 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4119 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4120 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004121 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4122 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4123 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4124 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004125 */
4126void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4127
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004128/*
4129 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4130 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4131 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004132#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004133
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004134/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004135 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004136 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004137 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4138 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004139 *
4140 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004141 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4142 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004143 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004144 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4145 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4146 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4147 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4148 *
4149 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4150 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4151 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4152 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4153 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4154 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4155 *
4156 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4157 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4158 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4159 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4160 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004161 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004162void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4163 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004164
4165/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004166 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4167 *
4168 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4169 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4170 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4171 *
4172 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4173 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4174 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4175 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4176 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4177 */
4178void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4180 struct sk_buff *skb,
4181 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4182 int max_rates);
4183
4184/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004185 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4186 *
4187 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4188 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4189 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4190 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004191 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4192 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004193 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004194 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4195 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004196 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004197 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4198 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004199 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004200void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004201 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004202
4203/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004204 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4205 *
4206 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4207 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4208 * specific skbs.
4209 *
4210 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4211 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4212 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4213 *
4214 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4215 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4216 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4217 * @info: tx status information
4218 */
4219void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4221 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4222
4223/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004224 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4225 *
4226 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4227 *
4228 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4229 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4230 * for a single hardware.
4231 *
4232 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4233 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4234 */
4235static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 struct sk_buff *skb)
4237{
4238 local_bh_disable();
4239 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4240 local_bh_enable();
4241}
4242
4243/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004244 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004245 *
4246 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4247 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4248 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004249 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4250 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004251 *
4252 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4253 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004254 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004255void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004256 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004257
4258/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004259 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4260 *
4261 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4262 * connected STA.
4263 *
4264 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4265 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4266 */
4267void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4268
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004269#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4270
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004271/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004272 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4273 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4274 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004275 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4276 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4277 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004278 */
4279struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4280 u16 tim_offset;
4281 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004282
4283 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004284};
4285
4286/**
4287 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4288 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4289 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4290 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4291 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4292 *
4293 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4294 * obtain the beacon template.
4295 *
4296 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4297 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004298 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4299 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004300 *
4301 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4302 *
4303 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4304 */
4305struct sk_buff *
4306ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4308 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4309
4310/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004311 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4312 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004313 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004314 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4315 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4316 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4317 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4318 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4319 *
4320 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004321 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004322 *
4323 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4324 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004325 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4326 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004327 *
4328 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004329 *
4330 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004331 */
4332struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4333 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4334 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4335
4336/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004337 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4338 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004339 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004340 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004341 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004342 *
4343 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004344 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004345static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4346 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4347{
4348 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4349}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004350
4351/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004352 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4353 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4354 *
4355 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4356 * This function is called implicitly when
4357 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4358 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4359 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4360 *
4361 * Return: new csa counter value
4362 */
4363u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4364
4365/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004366 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4367 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4368 *
4369 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004370 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004371 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4372 */
4373void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4374
4375/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004376 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004377 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4378 *
4379 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4380 */
4381bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4382
4383
4384/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004385 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4386 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4387 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4388 *
4389 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4390 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4391 *
4392 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004393 *
4394 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004395 */
4396struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4398
4399/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004400 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4401 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4402 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4403 *
4404 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4405 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4406 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4407 *
4408 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4409 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004410 *
4411 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004412 */
4413struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4415
4416/**
4417 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4418 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4419 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4420 *
4421 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4422 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4423 * BSSID and address is used.
4424 *
4425 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4426 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004427 *
4428 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004429 */
4430struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4431 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4432
4433/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004434 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4435 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004436 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004437 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4438 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004439 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004440 *
4441 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4442 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004443 *
4444 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004445 */
4446struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004447 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004448 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004449 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004450
4451/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004452 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4453 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004455 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4456 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004457 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004458 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4459 *
4460 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4461 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4462 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4463 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4464 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004465void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004466 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004467 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004468 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4469
4470/**
4471 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4472 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004473 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004474 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004475 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004476 *
4477 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4478 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4479 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004480 *
4481 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004482 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004483__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004485 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004486
4487/**
4488 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4489 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004490 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004491 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4492 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004493 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004494 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4495 *
4496 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4497 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4498 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4499 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4500 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004501void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004503 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004504 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004505 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4506
4507/**
4508 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4509 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004510 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004511 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004512 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004513 *
4514 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4515 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4516 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004517 *
4518 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004519 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004520__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004522 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004523 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004524
4525/**
4526 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4527 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004529 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004530 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004531 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004532 *
4533 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4534 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004535 *
4536 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004537 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004538__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004540 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004541 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004542 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004543
4544/**
4545 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4546 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004547 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004548 *
4549 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4550 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4551 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4552 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004553 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4554 *
4555 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4556 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004557 *
4558 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4559 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4560 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4561 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4562 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4563 * use common code for all beacons.
4564 */
4565struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004566ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004567
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004568/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004569 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4570 *
4571 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4572 *
4573 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4574 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4575 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4576 */
4577void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4578 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4579
4580/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004581 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004582 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004583 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4584 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004585 *
4586 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004587 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4588 * with this P1K
4589 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004590 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004591static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4592 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4593{
4594 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4595 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4596 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4597
4598 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4599}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004600
4601/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004602 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4603 *
4604 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4605 * and transmitter address.
4606 *
4607 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4608 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4609 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4610 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4611 */
4612void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4613 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4614
4615/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004616 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4617 *
4618 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4619 * in the packet.
4620 *
4621 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4622 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4623 * encrypted with this key
4624 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4625 */
4626void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4627 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004628
4629/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004630 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4631 *
4632 * @pos: start of crypto header
4633 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4634 * @pn: PN to add
4635 *
4636 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4637 * the packet payload)
4638 *
4639 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4640 * point to the crypto header)
4641 */
4642u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4643
4644/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004645 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4646 *
4647 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004648 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004649 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4650 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4651 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4652 *
4653 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4654 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4655 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4656 *
4657 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4658 * can be done concurrently.
4659 */
4660void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4661 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4662
4663/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004664 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4665 *
4666 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004667 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004668 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4669 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4670 * @seq: new sequence data
4671 *
4672 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4673 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4674 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4675 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4676 *
4677 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4678 * can be done concurrently.
4679 */
4680void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4681 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4682
4683/**
4684 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4685 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4686 *
4687 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4688 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4689 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4690 *
4691 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4692 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4693 */
4694void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4695
4696/**
4697 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4698 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4699 * @keyconf: new key data
4700 *
4701 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4702 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4703 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4704 *
4705 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4706 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4707 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4708 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4709 *
4710 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4711 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4712 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4713 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4714 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4715 * of the reconfiguration.
4716 *
4717 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4718 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4719 *
4720 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4721 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4722 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4723 * the key that's being replaced.
4724 */
4725struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4726ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4727 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4728
4729/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004730 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4731 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4732 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4733 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4734 * @gfp: allocation flags
4735 */
4736void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4737 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4738
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004739/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004740 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4741 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4742 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4743 *
4744 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4745 */
4746void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4747
4748/**
4749 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4750 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4751 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4752 *
4753 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4754 */
4755void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4756
4757/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004758 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4759 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4760 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4761 *
4762 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004763 *
4764 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004765 */
4766
4767int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4768
4769/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004770 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4771 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4772 *
4773 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4774 */
4775void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4776
4777/**
4778 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4779 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4780 *
4781 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4782 */
4783void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4784
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004785/**
4786 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4787 *
4788 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4789 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004790 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4791 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004792 *
4793 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004794 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004795 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004796void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4797 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004798
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004799/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004800 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4801 *
4802 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4803 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4804 *
4805 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4806 */
4807void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4808
4809/**
4810 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4811 *
4812 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4813 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4814 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4815 * while associating, for instance.
4816 *
4817 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4818 */
4819void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4820
4821/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004822 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4823 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4824 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4825 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4826 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4827 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4828 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4829 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004830 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004831 */
4832enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4833 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4834 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004835 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004836};
4837
4838/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004839 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4840 *
4841 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4842 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4843 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4844 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4845 *
4846 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4847 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4848 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4849 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4850 */
4851void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4852 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4853 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4854 void *data);
4855
4856/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004857 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004858 *
4859 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4860 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004861 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4862 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4863 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004864 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004865 *
4866 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004867 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004868 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004869 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4870 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004871static inline void
4872ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4873 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4874 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4875 void *data)
4876{
4877 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4878 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4879 iterator, data);
4880}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004881
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004882/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004883 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4884 *
4885 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4886 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4887 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4888 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004889 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004890 *
4891 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004892 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004893 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4894 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4895 */
4896void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004897 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004898 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4899 u8 *mac,
4900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4901 void *data);
4902
4903/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004904 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4905 *
4906 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4907 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4908 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4909 *
4910 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4911 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4912 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4913 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4914 */
4915void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 u32 iter_flags,
4917 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4918 u8 *mac,
4919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4920 void *data);
4921
4922/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004923 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4924 *
4925 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4926 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4927 * function for them.
4928 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4929 *
4930 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4931 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4932 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4933 */
4934void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4935 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4936 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4937 void *data);
4938/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004939 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4940 *
4941 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4942 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4943 *
4944 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4945 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4946 */
4947void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4948
4949/**
4950 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4951 *
4952 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4953 * workqueue.
4954 *
4955 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4956 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4957 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4958 */
4959void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4960 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4961 unsigned long delay);
4962
4963/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004964 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004965 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004966 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304967 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004968 *
4969 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004970 *
4971 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4972 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4973 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4974 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304975int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4976 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004977
4978/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004979 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004980 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004981 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4982 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4983 *
4984 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004985 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4986 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004987 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004988void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004989 u16 tid);
4990
4991/**
4992 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004993 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004994 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004995 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004996 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004997 *
4998 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4999 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5000 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5001 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005002int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005003
5004/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005005 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005006 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005007 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5008 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5009 *
5010 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005011 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5012 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005013 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005014void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005015 u16 tid);
5016
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005017/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005018 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5019 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005020 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005021 * @addr: station's address
5022 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005023 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5024 *
5025 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005026 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5027 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005028struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005029 const u8 *addr);
5030
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005031/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005032 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005033 *
5034 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005035 * @addr: remote station's address
5036 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005037 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005038 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5039 *
5040 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005041 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5042 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005043 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5044 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5045 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5046 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5047 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5048 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5049 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005050 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005051 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005052 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005053struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5054 const u8 *addr,
5055 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005056
5057/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005058 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5059 * @hw: the hardware
5060 * @pubsta: the station
5061 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5062 *
5063 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5064 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5065 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5066 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5067 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5068 *
5069 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5070 * manner.
5071 *
5072 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5073 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5074 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5075 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5076 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5077 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5078 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5079 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5080 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5081 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5082 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5083 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5084 * woke up while blocked or not.
5085 */
5086void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5087 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5088
5089/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005090 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5091 * @pubsta: the station
5092 *
5093 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5094 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5095 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5096 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5097 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005098 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5099 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5100 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5101 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5102 *
5103 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5104 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5105 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5106 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005107 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005108void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005109
5110/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005111 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5112 * @pubsta: the station
5113 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5114 *
5115 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5116 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5117 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5118 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5119 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5120 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5121 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5122 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5123 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5124 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5125 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5126 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5127 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5128 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5129 */
5130void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5131
5132/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005133 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5134 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5135 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5136 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5137 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5138 *
5139 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5140 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5141 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5142 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5143 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5144 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005145 *
5146 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5147 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5148 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005149 */
5150void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5151 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5152 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5154 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5155 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5156 void *data),
5157 void *iter_data);
5158
5159/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005160 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5161 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5162 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5163 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5164 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5165 *
5166 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5167 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5168 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5169 * in removal process will be skipped.
5170 *
5171 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5172 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5173 */
5174void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5176 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5177 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5178 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5179 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5180 void *data),
5181 void *iter_data);
5182
5183/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005184 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5185 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5186 * @iter: iterator function
5187 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5188 *
5189 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5190 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5191 * places while calling into the driver.
5192 *
5193 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5194 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5195 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005196 *
5197 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5198 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5199 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5200 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005201 */
5202void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5203 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5204 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5205 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5206 void *data),
5207 void *iter_data);
5208
5209/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005210 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5211 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5212 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5213 *
5214 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5215 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5216 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5217 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5218 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005219 * %NULL.
5220 *
5221 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005222 */
5223struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5225
5226/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005227 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5228 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005229 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005230 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005231 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005232 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005233 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5234 */
5235void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005236
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005237/**
5238 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5239 *
5240 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5241 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005242 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005243 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5244 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005245 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5246 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005247 *
5248 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5249 * without connection recovery attempts.
5250 */
5251void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5252
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005253/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005254 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5255 *
5256 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5257 *
5258 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5259 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5260 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5261 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5262 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5263 *
5264 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5265 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5266 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5267 * disconnect normally later.
5268 *
5269 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5270 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5271 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5272 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5273 */
5274void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5275
5276/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005277 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5278 * rssi threshold triggered
5279 *
5280 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5281 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005282 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005283 * @gfp: context flags
5284 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005285 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005286 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5287 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5288 */
5289void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5290 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005291 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005292 gfp_t gfp);
5293
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005294/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005295 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5296 *
5297 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5298 * @gfp: context flags
5299 */
5300void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5301
5302/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005303 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5304 *
5305 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5306 */
5307void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5308
5309/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005310 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5311 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5312 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5313 *
5314 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5315 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5316 */
5317void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5318
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005319/**
5320 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005322 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005323 *
5324 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5325 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5326 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5327 */
5328void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5329 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5330
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005331/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005332 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5333 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5334 */
5335void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5336
5337/**
5338 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5339 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5340 */
5341void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5342
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005343/**
5344 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5345 *
5346 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5347 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5348 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5349 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5350 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5351 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5352 *
5353 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5354 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5355 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5356 */
5357void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5358 const u8 *addr);
5359
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005360/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005361 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5362 * @pubsta: station struct
5363 * @tid: the session's TID
5364 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5365 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5366 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5367 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5368 *
5369 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5370 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5371 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5372 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5373 */
5374void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5375 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5376 u16 received_mpdus);
5377
5378/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005379 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5380 *
5381 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5382 * buffer.
5383 *
5384 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5385 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5386 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5387 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5388 */
5389void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5390
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005391/**
5392 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5393 *
5394 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5395 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5396 * reordering.
5397 *
5398 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5399 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5400 *
5401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5402 * @addr: station mac address
5403 * @tid: the rx tid
5404 */
5405void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5406 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5407
5408/**
5409 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5410 *
5411 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5412 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5413 * reordering.
5414 *
5415 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5416 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5417 *
5418 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5419 * @addr: station mac address
5420 * @tid: the rx tid
5421 */
5422void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5423 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5424
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005425/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005426
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005427/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005428 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005429 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005430 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5431 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5432 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005433 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5434 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005435 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5436 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5437 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5438 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5439 * RTS threshold
5440 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5441 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005442 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005443 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005444 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005445 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005446struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5447 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5448 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5449 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5450 struct sk_buff *skb;
5451 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5452 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005453 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005454 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005455 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005456};
5457
5458struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005459 const char *name;
5460 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005461 void (*free)(void *priv);
5462
5463 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5464 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005465 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005466 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305467 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005468 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005469 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5470 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005471 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5472 void *priv_sta);
5473
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005474 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5475 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5476 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5477 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005478 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5479 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5480 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005481 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5482 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005483
5484 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5485 struct dentry *dir);
5486 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005487
5488 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005489};
5490
5491static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005492 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005493 int index)
5494{
5495 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5496}
5497
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005498/**
5499 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5500 *
5501 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5502 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5503 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5504 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5505 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5506 * not null.
5507 *
5508 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5509 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5510 *
5511 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5512 * that this may be null.
5513 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5514 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5515 */
5516bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5517 void *priv_sta,
5518 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5519
5520
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005521static inline s8
5522rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5523 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5524{
5525 int i;
5526
5527 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5528 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5529 return i;
5530
5531 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005532 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005533
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005534 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005535 return 0;
5536}
5537
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005538static inline
5539bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5540 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5541{
5542 unsigned int i;
5543
5544 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5545 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5546 return true;
5547 return false;
5548}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005549
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005550/**
5551 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5552 *
5553 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5554 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5555 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5556 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5557 *
5558 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5559 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5560 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5561 */
5562int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5563 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5564 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5565
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005566int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5567void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005568
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005569static inline bool
5570conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5571{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005572 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005573}
5574
5575static inline bool
5576conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5577{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005578 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5579 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005580}
5581
5582static inline bool
5583conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5584{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005585 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5586 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005587}
5588
5589static inline bool
5590conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5591{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005592 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005593}
5594
5595static inline bool
5596conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5597{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005598 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5599 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5600 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005601}
5602
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005603static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5604ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5605{
5606 if (p2p) {
5607 switch (type) {
5608 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5609 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5610 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5611 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5612 default:
5613 break;
5614 }
5615 }
5616 return type;
5617}
5618
5619static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5620ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5621{
5622 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5623}
5624
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005625/**
5626 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5627 *
5628 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5629 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5630 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5631 *
5632 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5633 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5634 * matching GroupId management frame.
5635 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5636 */
5637void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5638 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5639
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005640void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5641 int rssi_min_thold,
5642 int rssi_max_thold);
5643
5644void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005645
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005646/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005647 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005648 *
5649 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5650 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005651 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5652 *
5653 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5654 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005655 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005656int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5657
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005658/**
5659 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5660 * @vif: virtual interface
5661 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5662 * @gfp: allocation flags
5663 *
5664 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5665 */
5666void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5667 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5668 gfp_t gfp);
5669
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005670/**
5671 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5672 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5673 * @vif: virtual interface
5674 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5675 * @band: the band to transmit on
5676 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5677 *
5678 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5679 */
5680bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5681 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5682 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5683
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005684/**
5685 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5686 *
5687 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5688 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5689 *
5690 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5691 *
5692 * private:
5693 *
5694 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5695 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5696 */
5697struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5698 u32 next_tsf;
5699 bool has_next_tsf;
5700
5701 u8 absent;
5702
5703 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5704 struct {
5705 u32 start;
5706 u32 duration;
5707 u32 interval;
5708 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5709};
5710
5711/**
5712 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5713 *
5714 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5715 * @data: NoA tracking data
5716 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5717 *
5718 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5719 */
5720int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5721 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5722
5723/**
5724 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5725 *
5726 * @data: NoA tracking data
5727 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5728 */
5729void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5730
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005731/**
5732 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5733 * @vif: virtual interface
5734 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5735 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5736 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5737 * @gfp: allocation flags
5738 *
5739 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5740 */
5741void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5742 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5743 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005744
5745/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005746 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5747 *
5748 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5749 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5750 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5751 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5752 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5753 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5754 *
5755 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5756 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5757 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5758 *
5759 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5760 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5761 *
5762 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5763 */
5764int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5765
5766/**
5767 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5768 *
5769 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5770 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5771 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5772 *
5773 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5774 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5775 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5776 *
5777 * @sta: the station
5778 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5779 */
5780void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5781
5782/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005783 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5784 *
5785 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5786 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5787 *
5788 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5789 */
5790struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5791 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005792
5793/**
5794 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5795 *
5796 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5797 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5798 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5799 *
5800 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5801 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5802 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5803 */
5804void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5805 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5806 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005807
5808/**
5809 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5810 *
5811 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5812 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5813 *
5814 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5815 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5816 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5817 * @gfp: allocation flags
5818 */
5819void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5820 u8 inst_id,
5821 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5822 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005823
5824/**
5825 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5826 *
5827 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5828 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5829 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5830 *
5831 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5832 * @match: match event information
5833 * @gfp: allocation flags
5834 */
5835void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5836 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5837 gfp_t gfp);
5838
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005839#endif /* MAC80211_H */